Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. such as duct. electrical panels. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing engineering workflows. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and piping. fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical. 3 . Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Germany. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.

to provide a richer and more finished design. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. For example. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. is located and accessed in the training files location. Create detail views. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Metric file names have an _m suffix. So.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. When you install the training files as instructed. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. However. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. After completing each exercise. In this exercise. Contact your CAD manager for more information. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. as well as how to open and save them. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. views. Create schedules. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. and tags. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. however. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you learn where the training files are located. annotations. templates. When you open a training file. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. when you add ductwork. such as templates and families. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. For example. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. On the Contents tab. and sheets to document the project. you can choose to save your work. You do not design entire systems. NOTE Depending on your installation.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and click the Training Files icon. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. click ➤ Save As. scroll down. 8 If you have made changes. enter the new file name. 4 Click the training file name. and click Open. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt and make changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. 3 In the right pane. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. verify that Project Files (*.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For Files of type. a list of file types displays. For example. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. double-click Imperial or Metric. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. Accessing Training Files | 5 . you are prompted to save the changes. the Open dialog displays. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Save. For File name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and you can open any supported file type.rvt.rvt) is selected. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If the length of the elevation is changed. ■ ■ 7 . Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. scope. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is one of association or connection. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. sections. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. hence. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the hierarchy of elements. schedules. and plans. 2D and 3D view. the operation of the software is parametric. drawings. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the floor or roof remains connected. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. every drawing sheet. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedules required for a building project. In the Revit MEP model. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. quantities. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. You learn the terminology. and phases when you need it.

Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. For example. dimensions. and 2D detail components. dimensions. levels. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. sinks. They display in relevant views of the design. and keynotes are annotation elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. and electrical panels. boilers. Datum elements help to define project context. walls and ceilings are hosts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . They help to describe or document the design. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. grids. ducts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. filled regions. tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. boilers. and electrical panels. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. tags.

and drawings of the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. This information includes components used to design the model. However. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. The project file contains all information for the building design. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. programming is not required. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and ceilings. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. such as roofs. and types. you must be in a section or elevation view. elevation views. top of wall. or bottom of foundation. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. families. first floor. If you can draw. views of the project. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you can explicitly control them. For example. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. for example. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. schedules.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. section views.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. In other cases. from geometry to construction data. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Often. To place levels. Project: In Revit MEP. Most often. North . floors. By using a single project file. In Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.

They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and wires. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. hiding. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. each in-place family contains only a single type. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. For example. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families include ducts. With a few clicks. A type can be a specific size of a family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. A type can also be a style. However. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. System families can be transferred between projects. You can also display several project views at one time. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Type: Each family can have several types. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. pipes. identical use. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. showing. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Then experiment with them. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. such as a A0 title block. and similar graphical representation. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. For example.

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .

many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. data and systems. and for switching views. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and CAD files. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. select the tool first. When working on the Modify tab. and settings. then select what you want to modify.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. architect-specific tools. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.

Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. By default. when adding duct.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. To keep a panel expanded. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. such as Export and Publish.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Export) On the application menu. click. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a file to open.. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Open) save the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands..

(Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down... publish the current project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. to. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Print) access product and license information. and Walkthrough. click. but is not enabled by default. or template file.On the application menu. (Publish) print the current drawing. saves a current project. Camera. family. annotation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. family. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 ..

Modify. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. displaying the same information. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. In addition. To show the Status Bar again. When you are highlighting an element or component. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. However. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Starting with the most recent command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. When you are using a command. Clipboard. To hide the Status Bar. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.To undo or redo a series of operations. Clear the Status Bar check mark. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. workshared components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. check the Status Bar. when you switch to another editing mode. This displays the command history in a list. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. repeat the command. or the Family Editor. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Group.

When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. for example. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. click (Modify). On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category.

After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. In the following steps.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.rvt. 1 Click ➤ Open.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials.

8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 To display SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. To modify or add snap increments. In the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Modifying the View | 19 . and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. the view zooms in on the selected area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. on the Navigation bar. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click . If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 6 Click in the drawing area.

Click and drag to orbit the design. ➤ Options. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press ESC. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click the SteeringWheels tab. As you move the mouse.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. moving the wheel to the desired location. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and then using the Zoom tool again. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels.

bottoms. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 2 Enter ZR. After you are familiar with these tasks. and select the duct. referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. display along the ends. Similar controls. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. and open Level 2 . moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. as shown. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. These are the drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. called drag controls.

Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. In this example. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

as shown. In this case. you want to move the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the starting position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. After selecting the element to move. for example. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. The duct is moved to the new position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 11 With the duct already selected. such as Move and Copy. and drag it to the left as shown. and click again to specify the ending position.Some commands.

Select Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 14 Enter VG.Supply. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Press ESC twice.End a command Some commands. For example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 13 To end a command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

The template selection may vary depending on your installation. under Template file. system families. and open Metric ➤ Templates.rte template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as coordination review and interference checking. 27 . 5 In the New Project dialog. and open North. New projects inherit all the families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You can either select a template from the template library. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You can choose from several templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. the default building levels and standard views. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and loadable families. 6 Click OK. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. link files. such as the default project units and settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. In that case. and modify system settings. create and manage views. select Project. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as ducts and pipes. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. under Create new. and geometry from the starting template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Finally. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and click Open. click Browse. click Training files. use copy/monitor. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. settings.

click Edit. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. create another new project using the Construction template. For example. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify.rte template and click Open. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ Under Create new. for Energy Data. NH. select Level 1. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. review the construction materials listed. you can select it now. under Energy Analysis. Click Cancel. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK twice. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Click OK. If you want to use a template other than the default. select Manchester. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. For Location. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. select School or University. In the Choose Template dialog. select Project template. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. (Browse). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. click (Browse). When you select the material. navigate to Metric Templates.8 In the drawing area. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. ■ For Building Construction. for City. 10 Using the same method. click Browse.

24 In the right pane.00 mm.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 110. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Rectangular. 27 Click OK.00 mm. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 140. For Categories. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 23 In the left pane. for 90. and fire protection systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 25 In the left pane. for 90. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and 310. under Pipe Settings. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and 140. 26 In the right pane.00 mm.00 mm.00 mm.00 mm. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane. piping. 33 Click OK. 290. click Round.000 mm. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. click Wiring. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 260. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Click OK twice. select Views. click Sizes. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for 20. under Duct Settings. plumbing.00 mm.00 mm.rfa and click Open. Holding CTRL. 110. under Duct Settings. select Identity Data. wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .

4 In the New Project dialog. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Auto . and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. sheets. You need to create the MEP model for the project. and groups that are contained in a project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 2 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. From the Positioning list. To enable this coordination. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select Family and Type. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. click Browse. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select View Name. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. click Training. Click Open. For Then by. under Create new. select Project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Notice that the file is saved as a template. families. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.Origin to Origin. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 Click OK. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Linking Projects In this exercise. under Template file. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed.rvt. 38 Close the file. select Sub-Discipline. For Then by. select Associated Level. For Sort by. In addition.

11 In the Type Properties dialog.Mech. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary. select Room Bounding. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Linking Projects | 31 . under Constraints. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 12 Click OK. select the linked architectural model. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

19 On the left side of the view. click Plan View types. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.Floor. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click the level line for 03.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.

indicating that a relationship is established. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. warnings notify you of any violations. and click to select the linked model. Linking Projects | 33 . 27 In the drawing area. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 29 In the drawing area. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. appears above the copied elements. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 34 On the Basics tab. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. and that the copied elements are monitored. a warning message displays. for the link file. After copying. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. select Custom. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. highlight the linked model. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. level 3. indicating that an element has changed. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. and the level 4. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. If you modify a monitored element. click Custom. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. click By Host View.

for V/G Overrides RVT Links. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. deselect Levels. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. 3 In the View templates dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Custom. Under Visibility. click Custom. for Name. for the link file. 36 Click OK. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines. 7 Click OK twice. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Under Visibility. deselect Parking. 5 On the Basics tab. click Edit.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Click OK. Site. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Planting. select Custom. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Roads. under View Properties.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. and Topography.

5 In the New Project dialog. select Mechanical and click OK. 8 Click ➤ Options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. under View Templates. 9 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . and click OK. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. journal cleanup options. click the Graphics tab. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 2 In the Options dialog.rte. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. click Training Files. 3 Under Colors. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. notification preferences. selection default options. they are not saved to project files or template files. These settings control the graphics. click Browse.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click the Graphics tab. 7 Click OK. select Invert background color. under Template file.

17 Press ESC to end the command. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 11 In the Color dialog. 13 Under Notifications. select None. click the File Locations tab. select yellow. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. you specify default file locations. However.10 Under Colors. 2 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. When an error occurs. and family libraries. 12 Click the General tab. 21 Close the file without saving it. 14 Click OK. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. family template files. including your default project template. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 18 Select the wall. click the value for Selection color. For Tooltip assistance. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 19 Press ESC to end the command. the elements causing the error display using this color. and click OK. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. select One hour.

An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. ➤ New ➤ Project. centralized. Specifying File Locations | 37 . Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. You can modify the existing library names and path. select the folder to save your files to by default. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 10 In the Places dialog. click Browse. click Browse. Click and click Browse to select a template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. you can start a new project with that template. Save. and Import dialogs. In the following illustration. Load. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. saving. However. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. and click Open. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. and you can create new libraries. TIP To view a template.3 Under Default template file. When you are opening. 8 Click Cancel. 4 Click Cancel. under Default path for family template files. This path is set automatically during the installation process. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. click Places. click Browse. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. such as in a large. 5 Under Default path for user files. note the list of library names.

Save. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Under Library Name. and change the name to My Library. and click OK twice. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Load. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click My Library.11 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. templates. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click Open. and click (Browse). click (Add Value). ➤ Open.

scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. custom color files. If you work in a large office. click Places. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you want to relocate this path. 3 Under Settings. 22 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. view the current path. 5 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Ignore words in uppercase. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 14 Click in the drawing area. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. This path is determined during installation. 20 Click ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 23 Click 24 Click OK. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 9 In the text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 27 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. specify the new location here. 12 Create a new project using the default template. click Edit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 21 On the File Locations tab. and decal image files. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 19 Click Cancel. click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Options dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. such as bump maps.

click Edit. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and enter 500 . 21 Under Personal dictionary. 6 In the Snaps dialog. you modify snap increments. 19 In the Options dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. delete sheetmtl-CU. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Close. 20 Under Settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Dimension Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap settings. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can turn snap settings on and off. click Training Files. click the Spelling tab. click File menu ➤ Save. click Browse. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 In the text editor. 22 In the text editor.. As you zoom in and out within a view. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . In this exercise. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.rte. click OK. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. 18 Click ➤ Options. 25 Close the file without saving it. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. under Template file. click Restore Defaults. 4 In the New Project dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 24 In the Options dialog.

If it does not. click OK. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. zoom out until it does so. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If you do not have a wheel button.7 Under Object Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. For example. deselect Chain. This is the increment that you added previously. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and move the cursor to the right. enter SM. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. TIP To zoom while sketching.

20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 26 Close the file. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 22 Move the cursor downward. and move the cursor to the right. 19 Enter SM. and the wall edges. 25 Click OK. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. with or without saving it. If you move the cursor along the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and specify the wall endpoint. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 500 . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.. the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that snapping is once again active.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 .

44 .

In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and then you create a plenum level. you can choose to save your work. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you first configure the linked architectural model. By following the recommended workflow. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first plan the system. As you create the mechanical system. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. water source heat pump (WSHP). and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will understand the process.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. At the end of the tutorial. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. After applying a color scheme to the zones. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.autodesk. go to http://www. 45 . you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This system consists of a cooling tower. In this lesson.

select Room Bounding.rvt. you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. NOTE When working with a linked file. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. click to select it. roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Space Plan is highlighted.MEP. click Training Files. and double-click West . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. not in the MEP training file. Next. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and after the linked model highlights. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. ceilings. These components are defined in the architectural training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Constraints. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click OK. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP .

8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. The new level is placed. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 16 Press Esc. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. enter 2600mm. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and click Properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click Plan View Types. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. For Offset. 9 On the Draw panel.

In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Identity Data. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Design. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 20 In the Project Browser. For View Classification. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. For Sub-Discipline. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you can choose to save your work. However. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Default View Template. select MEP . In the next exercise.Plenum. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. enter an Offset of 300mm. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and click Apply Default View Template. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. click Edit. In this exercise. for View Scale. Under View Depth. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for Top. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and for Offset. Under Extents. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select Plenum Plan. select Level Above (Level 3). and then place spaces in various types of areas. for Level. for View Range. enter 0. ■ Click OK twice. For Cut plane.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing Spaces | 49 . Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. walls. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. select New. For Upper Limit.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and ceilings). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted. For Space. For (Tag Location). ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Level 2 Plenum. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. enter 0. select Horizontal. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset.rvt.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). For Name. for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the drawing area. enter Library. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Click OK. ensuring coordination between the files. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Offset. select Level 3.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area.

Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and then press Esc. for Upper Limit. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. and for Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.

and scroll to the newly placed space. and select Corridor. In the schedule. 9 In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. 10 Click in the number column. click in the name column. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.7 In the Project Browser. and change the space number to 216A. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. as shown.Notice that the tag updates with the number change.

you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . place a space in the lower area of the split space.16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .Space Plan is highlighted. If necessary. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.rvt.

For Offset. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. right-click. and click Element Properties. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Level 3. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Interior and Reference. select Roof Level. select the space. 6 Enter VG. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. expand Spaces. In the plan view. click in the chase area to place the space. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Upper Limit.4 Press Esc. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 12 Click in the section view. and then click OK. enter 0. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 10 In the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Upper Limit. On the Options Bar.

enter 1200. and click OK. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . All spaces in the view are tagged. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and maximize the view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 15 Press Esc. enter 225PC. For Number. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.■ For Limit Offset. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. enter Chase. Bounding elements (such as walls. floors. ceilings. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Loaded Tags. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. Under Identity Data. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. for Name. 17 Type ZF.Space Plan. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. click Reference.20 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines. In the next exercises. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. After a space is placed in an area.Zoning is highlighted. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View ➤ Zones. under Spaces. click Training Files. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. In this exercise. it is automatically added to the Default zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. which removes the space from the Default zone.

The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning is highlighted. Next. select Occupiable. To display space reference lines. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. under Energy Analysis. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. As you do this. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ) or 5 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you assign spaces to zones in the building. The graphic in the System Browser updates. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. click Training Files. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you assign spaces to a zone. The Zone tool is active. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and a new zone is created. and click OK. indicating that the space is occupiable.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and Electrical 220 spaces. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. select Computer Lab 222. and modify the zone properties. Instruction. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Using the Edit Zone tab. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. In the System Browser. Click OK. you need to activate the zone visibility. 5 With the drawing area active. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Instruction 221.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. select HVAC Zones. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Expand HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). type VG. To view the zone in the drawing area. 4 In the drawing area.

3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Reference.Zoning view to activate it. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.West . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . click Finish Editing Zone. 11 Close the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Zoning is highlighted. expand 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. In this exercise. under Spaces. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. for Name. To display space reference lines.West .rvt. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Area B. You activated zone visibility in the views. enter 2 . under Identity Data. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 In the System Browser.Zoning. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 5 Click in the Level 1 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 15 Press Esc. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Select Attached End.Zoning floor plan. zoom out. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. click in the Level 2 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.

Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Front. double-click Level 1 . 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. enter Lounge . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and select 109 Lounge. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. double-click the zone tag. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zone information. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.East. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. space. on the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view. you verify the building. In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. click Training Files.Zoning to make it the active view. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and click OK. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. for Name Value. verify that Wireframe is selected. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser.

The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. select 1_South_Area C. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you isolate the space. click (Isolate). ■ ■ On the Details tab. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ Click (Highlight). Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. With 109 Lounge selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and air changes per hour. and in the People dialog. This indicates the outdoor air per person.33 °C : 12. outdoor air per area. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. For Heating Information. For People. For Construction Type. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This indicates the cooling set point.22 °C : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and then click OK. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. cooling air temperature. This indicates the heating set point.11 °C : 32.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and dehumidification set point. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person).22 °C : N/A is specified. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that 23. Below the list of spaces and zones. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. click . verify that <Building> is selected. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . Next. select Lounge/Recreation. select 109 Lounge. For Electrical Loads. the zone information displays for the selected zone. Next. heating air temperature. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. click . the space information displays for the selected space. ■ ■ ■ Next. click (Shading). you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and humidification set point. verify that 21. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and then click OK. and click OK.

and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. floors. roofs. open MEP . 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 15 In the Project Browser. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and other room-bounding components. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. For Offset. enter 0. select Level 3. click Cancel.

Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 212P. select Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. In this exercise. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and zone information. Under Energy Analysis. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. select Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Because this is an unoccupied space. Click OK. For Name. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. for Number. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and select space Plenum 212P. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and verify that the space has replaced the void. you verified building. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.

under Volume Computations. double-click Level 2 . enter 03101. If. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. you need to select this option. For Export Complexity. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. On the Place tab. NH. On the Weather tab. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select School or University. verify that 300 is specified. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. under Energy Analysis.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Element Properties. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select space Library 219. for Energy Data. verify that New Construction is selected. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. click Training Files. verify that Manchester. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. is selected. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. In order to select a space. 8 In the drawing area. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that <Building> is specified. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. For Building Construction. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Postal Code.rvt. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. this option adjusts the times automatically. for City. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click OK. click in the Value field. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. for Building Service. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . For Project Phase. verify that Level 1 is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. Click OK twice. For Location. For Ground Plane. and click OK. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Edit.Space Plan. right-click. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.

and click OK. m. and enter 15 sq. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Heated and cooled. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. for Values. select Library . select Specified. For Sensible. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Click OK twice.Audio Visual. enter 60 W. verify that <Building> is specified. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. You have verified the building information. verify that School or University is selected. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. NH. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual. Click OK. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 45 W. For Building Construction. Select Area per person. both. verify that Manchester. and click to learn the cause for the warning. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. for Values. Under Heat Gain (per Person). a cooling load.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For People. Under Power. select Specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. click in the Value column. for Values. For Building Service. or neither. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). For Space Type. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Latent. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. Next. is specified. and then click . for Values. click Edit. click Edit. For Location. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Condition Type. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. 12 Click the Details tab. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.

After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and under Heating Information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. There should be no warnings displayed. click Calculate. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. select 219 Library. or zone information. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and can be modified here.Space Plan. weather. 16 After you review the loads report. 15 Review the loads report for project. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. space. or make any changes to the model. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. click Information). you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 21 Click OK. select 219 Library.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 19 In the drawing area. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. In this exercise. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and zone information for the building model. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 17 In the loads report. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. under Energy Analysis. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. and a loads report displays. and click OK. You should correct the space error in the building model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.11°C. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. select HVAC Zones.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 5 Zoom in to the legend.rvt. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. click Training Files. For Color Scheme. in relatively small increments. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.

and click OK. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. The new scheme displays in the view. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Expanded Ranges.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Cooling Load . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.rvt. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.

select New Construction.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. for Formula. select Spaces. Select Schedule building components. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Formula. For Discipline. select Spaces. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Phase. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select HVAC. enter Space Airflow Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. and click OK. enter Airflow Delta.Space Fill is the active view. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Name. Under Available fields. more category options are available. click (Browse). Click OK. In the Fields dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. for Select available fields from. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Formula. select Air Flow. Click OK. enter . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the Calculated Value dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Type. and then click .

select red. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and then select Hidden field. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and then click Conditional Format. click the color swatch. For Then by. For Value. and Blank line. For Background Color. select Level. right-click to access schedule properties. a view opens that contains the selected space. ■ The schedule displays. For Fields. Header. Click OK twice. verify that Show is highlighted. Select Ascending. In the Color dialog. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and click OK. select Not Between. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Under Conditions to Use. select Number. select Airflow Delta.

you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Because no air terminals have been placed in the model.

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Then. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . and work with the airflow schedule. In this lesson. you will create supply air systems. After system creation. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you modify air terminal parameters. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After completing the air systems lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.

5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and scroll to space 223. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 3 In the ceiling view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the space crossing lines display. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.

the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and then press Esc to end the command. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. If the host element is modified or moved. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the hosted elements are updated as well. enter 215 L/s.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Also. and press Enter. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. for Flow. type 3600. 17 Move the cursor down. click Place on Face. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. select the diffuser. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and press Enter. 9 On the Placement panel. 13 On the Options Bar.

Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. As you place the return diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. as shown. 22 In the drawing area. Next. select one of the diffusers. click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. and click Open. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and then press Esc.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 24 In the Open dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 28 On the Placement tab. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 25 In the drawing area. click Yes. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

for Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click OK. Level. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Strong Reference. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. under Other. and click to select the lines. select one of the return diffusers.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Project Browser.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 40 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. align the other return diffuser. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select the vertical grid line as shown. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 43 Using the same method. as shown.

48 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. under Mechanical.44 While pressing Ctrl. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. and on the Options Bar. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and click OK. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. enter 310 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. clear LeftArrow. for Flow. right-click. 47 Using the same method. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . select both return diffusers.

verify that Tag on Placement is selected.200 Neck. the space crossing lines display. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and double-click Level 1 .Design to make it the active view.rvt. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. click Training Files. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. select M_Supply Diffuser . 10 In the drawing area. 8 In the Type Selector. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . for Scale. expand HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Plan . at the lower left corner of the building. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. click 1 : 100.

If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing.Airflow. enter 170 L/s. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. for Offset. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. type 6000. and then press Enter. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. Under Mechanical . enter 2400. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Press Esc. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. for Flow. Click OK. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. move the cursor down. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. under Constraints. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 11 Select the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. By copying the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. As a result. Also.

16 Using the same method. 18 On the Options Bar. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.

for Sort by. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. enter 210 L/s. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. and Flow. under space 115. double-click System Type. mark. for Flow. 25 Click OK 3 times. select Air Terminals. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. select Mark. 27 In the schedule. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. under Other. 29 Using the same method. select 21. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. type. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and press Enter. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. for Embedded Schedule. 26 Using the method learned previously. Type. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. tile the windows. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. it is a negative value. under Available Fields. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then right-click in the schedule. click Edit.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Mark. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. For Category. Next. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. As you highlight the zone. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. 31 In the drawing area. as shown. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. and maximize Level 1 . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.Design. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.HVAC Plan .

39 Press Esc twice to end the command.7-18 kW .43 W (approximately 1. 33 Click OK. 35 In the Type Selector. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. select M_WSHP .Horizontal . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. and under Energy Analysis. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.3 times the heating load).32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.High Efficiency . 36 In the drawing area.

44 Zoom in to space 115. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. enter . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. for Constraints ➤ Offset. As you add diffusers to systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and click OK. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and click View ➤ Systems. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. However.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump.Design is highlighted. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. click Training Files. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. the space crossing lines display. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. After creating the logical connection. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space. including energy analysis. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.rvt. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. right-click the title. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. In this exercise.

Connect Into. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. and Flow value. On the Options Bar. and the system connects them. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. System Name. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . review the Number of Elements. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 12 In the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 17 Using the method learned previously. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the number of elements is updated. 11 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click OK. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. the air terminals are the children. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 15 Click Cancel.

you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. under Mechanical. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. In this exercise. for Mark. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for System Name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise.Rename the system Next. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Identity Data. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. click Training Files. 25 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select Network. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Also. A Generate Layout tab displays. 4 In the drawing area. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. For Duct Type. enter 3000.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select the upper left diffuser. click Settings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . indicating that it’s the active view. for Solution Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter 3000. For Duct Type. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Select Branch. and display solution 1. For Offset.Round.Design is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. which provides various layout tools.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. For Flex Duct Type. the Network type provides several solutions.HVAC Plan. In this case. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Offset. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 7 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. as is the elbow itself. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. enter 900. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. 11 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example. you’ll get an error in a later step. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as shown. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Click OK.

Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. thus it is not part of the system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. for Color Scheme. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Usually. and click to select it. highlight a segment of the main duct. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Using a flow-based color scheme. and click OK.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and equipment.Flow. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. select Duct Color Fill . a disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. If the entire network does not highlight. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The first time you press Tab.

under Mechanical . The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and then click OK. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Values Displayed. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 20 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. but not all values are used in this view. and press Enter. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.Airflow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Graphics.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select By View. select the WSHP. for Flow. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). select one of the diffusers in the system.

Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. for Schemes. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Friction. and then click to select it. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and enter .Velocity. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.65 Pa/m. Select Only. Select the upper segment of main duct. Under Constraints. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. and drag it to the right. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK. select Calculated Size Only. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. click Cancel. and then press Esc to clear the selection. highlight a segment of the duct. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and select 400. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.

static pressure. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).The ductwork and fittings are updated. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Use the information that displays (flow. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. pressure. and pressure loss. Using this tool. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. 35 Click Finish. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. enter 3000. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. NOTE When drawing duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.3D MEP. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Front. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click MEP .8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . select the top right diffuser. right-click the connector grip. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 11 On the Options Bar. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . click the corner where the Top. 14 In the Project Browser.

it is considered a closed loop. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . in space 115. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). The ductwork is automatically created. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 25 Press Esc. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.22 Using the same method.

Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click to select it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. select a segment of the main duct. under Constraints. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Mechanical . such as a plenum. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 40 Using the same method. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. and click OK. and then click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).Airflow. clear Restrict Height.

108 .

you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Create return and supply piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Then. you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model. In this lesson. including 2 base mounted pumps. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. and a cooling tower located on the roof. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Horizontal High Efficiency . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Left Return . and select M_WSHP . in corridor 328.HVAC Plan . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.7-18kW . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click the top edge of the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 8 Click the corridor wall face. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. and click to place the dimension. verify that Wall faces is selected. and enter 600. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the WSHP.

as shown. and in the Type Selector. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .11 Press Enter and then press Esc. select the 2 WSHPs.) 14 Click Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

for Offset. Click OK. enter 2750. enter 0. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .75 L/s. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Water Flow.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Modify. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Under Mechanical.

physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. including flow and pressure. Create the logical connection between the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. but without a corresponding system. Unlike logical connections (systems).

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you assign equipment to systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click the Systems column heading. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the System Browser. where it is easier to review the information. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Therefore. Assigning a system component to an existing system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.Design is highlighted. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. while pressing Ctrl. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. click Training Files. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.rvt. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. This display indicates that the system is selected. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. select the 2 WSHPs. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Creating a Piping System | 115 .Mech 330). In the System Browser. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.HVAC Plan .

12 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. select the boiler.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. You have created the hydronic return system. and the Edit System tool is not active. for System Name. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.

The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and bypasses the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the boiler. 22 In the Select Connector dialog.HVAC Plan . 23 Close the roof plan view. In cooling mode. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. double-click Roof . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System.Design. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. and click OK. In heating mode. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. Creating a Piping System | 117 .

you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. including the flow rate and size of the component. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click Expand All. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. You also manually modify the layout path as required.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. expand Piping. 29 Right-click CHWS. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. expand the Hydronic Return system category. enter 0. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click Column Settings. 32 In the System Browser. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. indicating the logical connection. and click Select. and click Properties. and click OK. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. In the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. for Water Flow. under Mechanical. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). you can view several parameters.8.

press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. select Mechanical Equipment. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.Mech 330).HVAC plan view range are highlighted. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you can place the cursor over a system component. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . click Check None.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . the boiler.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog. A system preview displays in red.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. then the Select a System dialog displays.

verify that Solutions is selected. click Settings. For Inset. or architectural components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 10 Click OK. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. select Perimeter. enter 450. 13 Click Cancel. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . structural beams. select CHWR. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. duct. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 14 On the Generate Layout tab.9 In the Select a System dialog. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 11 On the Options Bar. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.

the flow for each WSHP is 0. With each Tab.75 L/s. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 17 Optionally. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and press Tab 3 times. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. to display the path with thinner lines.

and click OK. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 24 Press Esc. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. notice that the Water Flow is 1.50 L/s.75 L/s). 22 Select the boiler.50 L/s. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. under Mechanical. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.

the Number of Elements is now 8.Design. 28 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Level 1 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel. Logically. click Edit System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.

94 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. which propagates flow throughout the system. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 35 Using the drag control. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.94 L/s. note that the value for Flow is 4.44 L/s. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and click Cancel.50 L/s. under Mechanical.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. access its instance properties. Next. as shown. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 38 Using the same method. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. so the total flow of 6. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you physically close the CHWR loop.

41 Click OK. 40 In the Select a System dialog. Click Settings. select a WSHP.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. select CHWS.00%. enter 450. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. For Inset.

48 While pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. (Both sections are at the same elevation. In a later exercise. 46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. as shown.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select a different layout solution. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 50 Using the same method. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or manually modify the pipe. To create the piping system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Either relocate the system components. as shown. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. or offset elevations are incorrect.49 Select the 4-way arrow control.

Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. as shown.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Plan . double-click 3D Building. As you work in the training file.rvt. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and the return pipes are magenta. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown. 6 Press Delete.

9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point.

Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click OK. and the lower one is secondary. 13 In the plan view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. The connections are automatically created. select the return pipe riser. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 12 In the 3D view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

In a plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. enter 381. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and you select 1 connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. enter 600. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. for Offset. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 18 Press Esc twice. 19 In the plan view. and the appropriate fittings are created. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK. As you place piping runs that are close together.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.

and select it. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click the minus symbol. and click Draw Pipe. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting.

and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 29 If necessary.28 Press Esc. select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 1200. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. for Offset.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. right-click the bottom control on the tee. as shown.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 35 Using the method learned previously. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . type 300. and press Enter.■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850. for Offset.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system. Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify.

47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. under Mechanical. 40 Click Cancel. 46 Press Esc. In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. view the properties for the secondary pump. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 43 Press Esc.44 L/s. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 42 Click OK. notice that Flow is 6. right-click. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. which is rounded up to 3. 41 Using the same method. 44 In the 3D view. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that under Mechanical.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 48 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. select the cooling tower.44 L/s). you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties. right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. the value is 0 L/s.50 or 50% of the Flow. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

44 L/s. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. 49 Press Esc. and close the dialog. select the cooling tower.

rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . When the valve is open. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. Adding Valves In this exercise. the water bypasses the cooling tower.52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and is heated by the boiler.

and select M_Ball Valve . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.4 On the Options Bar. Adding Valves | 145 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 8 Press Esc twice.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.

place another M_Ball Valve . 12 Select M_Ball Valve .10 Press Esc.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . parallel to the previously placed valve. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s. and click OK. Adding Valves | 147 . right-click. 19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. under Mechanical. verify that Flow is 0 L/s.

22 Using the method you just learned. In heating mode. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. validate that the Flow is 6.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Initially. and select M_Ball Valve . Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 20 Select the bypass valve. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.rvt. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.44 L/s. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.44 L/s. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and select M_Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.

8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design is highlighted.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.HVAC Plan . 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. as shown. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK. click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 149 . indicating that it’s the active view.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Flow.

Click OK. and click to select the branch. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Friction.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. enter 1. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and for Velocity. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and enter 220 Pa/m. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Select And. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.5 m/s. Under Constraints. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Branch Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.rvt. and double-click 3D Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 151 . you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Using the System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Inspecting the System In this exercise.

flow. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). and pressure information including pressure loss. as shown. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.

0 L/s. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. for Fluid Temperature. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3 . Warnings display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. targeting those systems that need attention. the Static Pressure is 41916.7.Design. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and to size pipe. you need to validate them. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. select 32° C.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. inspect Section 6 again.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 10 Click Finish.4 Pa.Note that the Flow is 1. and click OK. 9 Using the same method.HVAC Plan . and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.1 Pa. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.

and click View. 10 Using the same methods. thus assigning the components to a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. and select Level 3 . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed.Design floor plan. and click Show to view all of the system components. After you have assigned all components to systems. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. For example.HVAC Plan . 4 In the System Browser.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. double-click Level 1 . and confirm unassigned system components. otherwise. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.Design. After you assign components to a system. right-click Hydronic Return. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the System Browser. 12 In the System Browser. click Close. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and for pipe sizing. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and click Expand All. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). TIP If you have multiple views open. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. As you learned when placing components. right-click the Systems titlebar. If you place components without assigning them to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. the pipe is associated with that system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser.

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

and demand factors that are applied in the design. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 90. enter THHN. click (Open). distribution systems. speeding up the design phase. As you place components and create circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Factor. enter 70.Wire Sizes. You also add a wiring type. expand Wiring . For Temperature. wiring.rvt. Click OK. select Copper. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature.04. enter 1. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. In this exercise you review electrical settings. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select Wiring Types. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ For Material. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Select Correction Factor.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Material. ■ Click New Correction Factor.

enter 50. For Neutral Size. select Demand Factors. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 1. enter 250. For Value. select Distribution Systems. Click OK. For L-L Voltage. For Conduit Type. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Maximum. select 3. enter 120/240. enter 240. select Steel. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. For Minimum. select Voltage Definitions. For Neutral Multiplier. enter 240. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 75.0. select 10000 VA. For Insulation. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. enter 220. Under More Than.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. For Wires. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Split. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 120. select Hot Conductor Size. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For L-G Voltage. select THHN. select Power. For Phase. select 240. For Max Size. Select Neutral Required. By specifying a range. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 2000. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select Single. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions.

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level.Lighting. select Illuminance. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Verify that Instance is selected.Lighting Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. click Training Files. For Discipline. select Spaces. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. Later in the tutorial. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. click (Open).rvt. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. enter Required Lighting Level. and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). For Group Parameter Under.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Click OK twice. select Electrical . then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. and double-click Level 2 . 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the drawing area. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Lighting group in the space element properties. click Add. restrooms. such as offices. For Type of Parameter. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. select Electrical. under the Electrical . Under Categories.

For Name. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. Select Schedule Keys. under Electrical . double-click Required Lighting Level. enter 485. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available Fields. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. Click OK. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. enter Open Office. Click OK. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. enter Lighting Levels. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. select Spaces. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and for Key Name. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.Lighting.

22 Using the same method. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. Select Blank Line. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 Click OK twice.Lighting Plan. which is mapped to project units. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. select Required Lighting Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . change the sort order back to the default setting. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. Notice that as you enter the data.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . click Edit. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.

since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. select Instruction-Standard. that Required Lighting Level is blank. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. the value input applies only to the selected space.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. In this exercise. 27 Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. for Lighting Levels. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. click (Open). under Identity Data. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Later in this exercise. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter.

click (Add Value) again. verify the By Range is selected. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . and click (Add Value). select Required Lighting Level. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and click (Add Value) five times.rvt. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. for Title.00. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. ■ Click OK. for Name. for Category.00 lx. click (Duplicate).00. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Select the scheme for 450. and press ENTER. select Spaces. click Training Files. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter 900.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.00 lx. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. For Color. Under Schemes. and press Enter. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. enter 200. then the new value will be 400 lx. Select the scheme for 500 lx. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and in the At Least column. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. enter Required Lighting Levels.00 lx. enter 800. 00 lx still selected. and press ENTER. For example. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. Select the scheme for At Least 20.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. Name. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 8 In the drawing area. Click OK. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. and Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . double-click Number. For Type. select Required Lighting. and double-click Level 2 . 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. select Electrical. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Lighting CF. for Available Fields. select Illuminance. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 13 Click Calculated Value. Average Estimated Illumination. enter Lighting Delta. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select Spaces. Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Name. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. For Color Scheme. select Spaces. For Discipline.

select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. select Level. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK. for Formula. Click Background Color. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK three times. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header. for Sort by. for Test. for Custom Colors. press the spacebar. On the Formatting tab. and click Browse. for Fields. For Value. select Required Lighting Level. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. click Browse. type a hyphen. under Condition. Click Conditional Format. select Red. Select Blank Line.■ For Formula. select Not Between. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK twice. select Average Estimated Illumination.

16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

Then. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. Create a panel schedule. Create power loads. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. First. Use the System Browser to check your design. 171 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. power circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.

Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. By using orange as the color for this range. for Basic Colors. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . select Orange. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the Color dialog. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling plan. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. select the color legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx.rvt. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. for the Spaces Category. You can create additional color schemes.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. Under Scheme Definition. click (Open).Lighting CF view is open. select Average Estimated Illumination.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 13 Click the Level 2 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.

21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 fc range. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. the fixtures will move accordingly. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Space Lighting Analysis view. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.the +/.5 fc range is satisfied. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.277V. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

■ Under Electrical Loads. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Apparent Load. In the Name dialog. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.00 VA. for Name enter and click OK. enter 162.

click the value for Initial Intensity. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. click (Open). 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. select the top center fixture. ■ Click Apply. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Type Mark. Under Photometrics. In the next exercise. Junction Boxes. click Training Files. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics. Placing Switches. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Lamp. Under Electrical. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. specify 15000.ies and click Open. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you add switches.93. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter .00 lm. 2 In the drawing area. and receptacles to your design. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select Xenon and click OK. select 463T5_S. select T5 [HO]. enter F15. and click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. ■ Under Photometrics. select Luminous Flux. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Ballast Loss Factor. junction boxes. enter . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 9 In space Library 219. for Color Preset. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.85.rvt.

277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

The element type M_Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes. Select M_Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.NoLoad.

enter 2750. enter JB-1NL. for Mark. In the Type Properties dialog. for Level 2 . NOTE When entering values. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Under Electrical. Click OK twice.Offset.14 Press ESC to end the command. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 15 Select the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Click Edit Type. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. note the Number of Poles is 1.

Placing Switches. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Name. 23 In the System Browser. right-click and click Column Settings. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. 26 In the System Browser. Distribution System. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Number. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Load. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 187 .22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. Click OK. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Select Size. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

move the cursor along the wall. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 .The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down.

and Receptacles | 191 . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

and work toward the higher voltage. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.rvt. zoom to the space Electrical 220. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.Surface: 100A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).208V MCB .equipment. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Adding wiring to a project is optional. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area.

for Max. select 120/208 Wye.Loads. Click OK. enter LP-2B. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye. enter PP-2B. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . #1 Pole Breakers. 7 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK. 8 Select the panelboard. enter 20.480V MCB . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. for Max. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. for Distribution System. enter 20. For Panel Name.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 23 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. click Check None.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command.

32 Press ESC.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

click Check None. click (Open). 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. except without wire. for Hot Conductors. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. click Training Files. enter 2. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Loads. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and create permanent wiring. Click OK.39 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. select Wires. and for Category. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 42 In the Filter dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.

Expand Electrical. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. expand Power. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and verify that Load. 13 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Click OK. Distribution System. Rating. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. Voltage. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and then expand circuit 1. right-click on the Systems heading. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221.

Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. change the Voltage to 277V. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Click Tags. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

enter FR4. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. under Identity Data. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. click below the first one to place it. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 40 Click OK twice. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. Click Yes. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click OK. click Edit Type. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Break. 35 Press ESC to end the command.

52 In the Save As dialog. Click OK. Click Save. and for Category. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.rfa.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.rvt. 54 Select all of the tags. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. enter a comma. Click OK. for File Name. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. click Check None. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 57 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. and click Apply. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 2 In the drawing area. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. enter a. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. under Electrical Lighting. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for Switch ID.

Lighting. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. for switch ID. under Electrical . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. enter b. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.

11 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical . and data systems. and for Category. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Click OK. click (Open).Loads. for Hot Conductors. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and click Element Properties. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.rvt. enter 2. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. Circuits are used for power. 7 In space Electrical 220. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads | 207 . select the PP-2B panel. lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. click Training Files. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. select Electrical Fixtures. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Next you create a circuit and size wire.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select Wiring. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the right pane. and click to select the circuit. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 19 Click OK. and click Open. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa.

as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. 29 In space Instruction 221. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 26 Press Delete.

30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 Click OK. 1-#12. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Training Files. click Rebalance Loads. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. zoom to space Electrical 220. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. the distribution is shifted. 2 In the drawing area. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. Scroll down. select panel LP-2B.rvt. click Open. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. for Rating. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 1-#12. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. After re-balancing loads. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. Had there been a greater imbalance. enter 30A. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Under Electrical-Loads. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 1-#10. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 1-#10.

23 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. select the transformer TP-2B.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. and click OK. 14 Close the warning dialog. and click Finish Editing Circuit. enter 25A. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 24 Click Select Panel. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 15 Select panel PP-2B. enter 40A. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. and click OK. 17 Close the warning dialog.Loads. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Next you create a panel schedule. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 6 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Under Header Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 5 mm. select Bold and Italic. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. expand Sheets (all). 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. The Panel Schedule Report displays. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. click (Open). for Appearance. 4 Close the report. click Edit. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Select PP-2B. select Berlin Sans FB. and open E601 . under Other. Under Body Text. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. for Font Size. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 5 In the Project Browser. 10 Click OK twice. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. click Training Files. Under Header Text. for Font. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .Panel Schedules. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. enter 4 mm. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

rvt. each with a load of 180VA. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. select space Lounge 212. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Expand Unassigned. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. press TAB once. In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. click Training Files. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. click (Open). Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the dialog. select MDP-1. Checking Your Design | 215 . Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. In the System Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Warnings. 18 Select panel LP-2C. zoom to space Electrical 214. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 17 In the drawing area. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. for Panel. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

in addition to loading existing families. click Training Files. and click OK. 219 . planning is critical to a successful design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click PVC .Vent.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Adding a pipe size. 4 In the Name dialog. In this lesson. you create a PVC pipe type.Design is open. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 2 In the Project Browser.Sanitary. type PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.rvt. click Duplicate.

under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.006 mm.PVC . select Plastic. 13 In the right panel. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary. 25 For Outside.PVC . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.DWV. select M_Tee Sanitary . enter 45. and open Metric\M_Trap P . Tee. click Training Files. Tap. 17 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. for Nominal. enter -1250.000 mm. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .PVC . select Tee. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 10 On the Selection panel. 27 For the new pipe size. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter 46.293 mm. and click OK.Sch 40 . For Offset. 15 For System Type. under Mechanical. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.DWV: Standard. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Cross.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . click Pipe Settings. 21 In the right pane. 6 Click OK. select Sanitary. 18 For System Type. select None. enter 54.Sch 40 . 26 Click OK. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . In the Project Browser. 24 For Inside Diameter.5 In the Type Properties dialog.Vent is listed.rfa. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. PVC . for Material. under Pipe Types. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 22 Click New Size. and click Main. click Modify. select Branch. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 10°.

Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. 221 . and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. add a hot water heater. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. including plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. Create the cold water system. and hot and cold water piping.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. and click OK. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. a toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select one of the components in the system. for example. A preview of the piping layout displays. as shown.

28 On the Options Bar. select PVC . enter -350 mm. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You accept this suggested solution. 29 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. select 100 mm. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Solution Type. select PVC . The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 24 For Offset. and click OK. 23 For Pipe Type. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -1225. select Branch. enter -350 mm. and click Settings. 26 For Pipe Type. 21 On Options Bar. 30 Click Modify. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system.Sanitary. and for Offset.05%. 25 In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The default settings are automatically modified. select Intersections.Sanitary. and modify it to meet project requirements. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Slope. enter 1. for Diameter. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select Main. 27 For Offset.

select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.33 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 34 Click Modify.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Overall. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

under M_Lavatory .rvt. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Plumbing Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Public. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. select 560 mmx560 mm . in the Type Selector.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 8 Select the sink.2.7 Click Modify. enter 711. select Multiple. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter 711. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .2.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. click Add To System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and press Enter to create the third sink. 12 In the drawing area. Press Esc. 11 In the System Browser. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .Design ➤ 3D Views.16 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Overall. In the System Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . double-click 3D Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown.

with the tee fitting selected. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 760 mm. and click to draw the pipe. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. press Spacebar.05%. 27 Click Modify. When you press the Spacebar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). enter 1. and click Draw Pipe.22 In the plan view. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 26 On the Options Bar. for Slope. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. for Offset.

under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 31 Click Modify.PVC .Sch 40 .DWV.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 29 In the Type Selector. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.

zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 150 mm. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 Select the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. for Offset. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 36 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. right-click the right connector.33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. enter 305 mm.

as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Esc. enter 150 mm. right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. 49 Using the same method. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe.

55 In the 3D view. 54 Click Modify. 53 Using the same method.DWV.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select Standard.PVC . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method. under M_Trap P . select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 52 In the plan view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

enter 150 mm. Move the cursor to the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. and press Enter. select the left P-Trap. Click in the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and click Draw Pipe. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify. connect the right sink to the double wye. In the plan view..

Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. In the Type Selector. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view.

65 Close the file with or without saving it. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. adjusting the sanitary stack. verify that 1. click Finish. click Training Files. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.05% is selected. and verify the slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope.rvt. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar.

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view. select the vertical stack. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Design.Floor level line. right-click the top connector. 3 In the Section view. select the elbow fitting on the right. select Standard. 7 On the Selection panel. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. click Modify.Plumbing Plan .DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 5 Select the tee. and click to draw the pipe.PVC .Design.Sch 40 .Overall. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe. as shown.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

267 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. click Training Files. You create a new pipe type.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. and click Duplicate. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this lesson. 2 Right-click Standard. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In this tutorial.autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For System Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. In this exercise. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For System Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Carbon Steel. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Offset. For Offset. However. verify that 2800 is specified. In the next exercise. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Next. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For Pipe Type. under Mechanical. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. or architectural components. for Material. In the left pane.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). click Rename. verify that 2800 is selected. you modify the type properties of the pipe. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. structural beams. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. and then click OK. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. duct. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. For Pipe Type. 6 In the Project Browser. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. and click Properties.

select Spaces.rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Design is highlighted. click Add. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . right-click. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Under Categories. for Sprinkler Zone. for Name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 6 In the drawing area. enter Zone 1. and then click OK. click Training Files. 5 Click OK twice. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. select Fire Protection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Using a crossing window. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. under Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .

13 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that only Spaces are selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK.rvt. and click OK. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. select Zone 1. to which you add various parameters. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. you create schedules for sprinkler design. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. including a calculated value parameter. and then access instance properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Fire Protection. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Select Schedule keys. and on the ribbon. For Unit symbol. click Add Parameter. and click Field Format.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the new header.Fire Protection Piping Plan . For Key name. The schedule displays. For Units. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Maximum Spacing. Click OK. select 0 decimal places. click the Formatting tab. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Millimeters. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Light. For Type of Parameter.Design is highlighted. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. for Name. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Obstructed-Combustible. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Click OK. select mm. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 11 Click OK twice. 6 Using the same method. For Name. double-click on each column separator. For Group parameter under. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces. select Length. 9 On the Formatting tab. select Maximum Spacing. indicating that it’s the active view. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. 16 Using the same method. For Name.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. and press Enter. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically. select Spaces. enter 40. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. enter 4575. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.

select 0 decimal place. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Number. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Type. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Formula. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). In the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. select Area. under Available fields. Click OK. select Minimum Sprinklers. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. click . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 22 Click OK twice. select Fixed. select Common. For Units. For Rounding.

select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. ■ In the Format dialog. and then select Hidden field. At the bottom of the dialog. select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Field Format. under Other. and click View Properties. select Grand totals. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Then by. For Fields. select Level. For Then by (second instance). and select Totals only. select Level. for Sort by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 26 Click OK 3 times. for Sorting/Grouping. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. click Edit. verify that Use default settings is selected. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. Under Field formatting. Select Header and Blank line.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule.

36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. for Available fields. right-click the schedule. double-click Type. click Edit. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Filter by. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. under Other.27 In the drawing area. for Fields. and click View Properties. click Edit. select Level equals Level 2. select Calculate totals. 30 Click OK twice. and select Totals only. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. System Name. for Filter. delete the word Maximum. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. For Category. Under Field formatting. select Sprinklers. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and Count. select Count. On the Formatting tab. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Grand totals. select Embedded Schedule. for Embedded Schedule. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and click View Properties.

select Ordinary. Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. As a result. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select Light. 41 In the plan view. 52 Click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 43 Click Cancel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Fire Protection Plan Design.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. double-click FP . and click OK. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 48 In the floor plan. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. but their values are not determined. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 46 With the space still selected. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 44 In the schedule. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 50 Access the instance properties.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.rvt. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. At the end of this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 2 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. 279 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you place the sprinklers. you will understand the process. go to http://www. By following the recommended workflow. methodology. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. However.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. click Training Files. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. As you create the system. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present.

After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 3 In the Project Browser. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When this happens. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

select the sprinklers that you placed. and 207. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. Also. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. 9 In space Instruction 202. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. while pressing Ctrl. 206. 10 Press Esc twice. verify that Constrain is cleared. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.

and then press Esc. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Next. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you place non-hosted sprinklers. open Design ➤ FP . and 200C). you place non-hosted sprinklers. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. as shown. 17 In the Project Browser. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 200B. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design. 18 Type WT. specify a vertical offset. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.

click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. under Constraints. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. In this exercise.0. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and with piping (physical connection). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and press Enter. enter 11. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 25 Click OK.FP_Ceiling view. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This number is determined in the schedule. for Offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Next. and click Element Properties. move the cursor to the right. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. In the next exercise. For Number. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the schedule updates. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Because the sprinkler is not hosted. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you adjust the offset.19 In the floor plan. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2900 mm. enter 4100. 29 Press Esc. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.

This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click Training Files.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 5 Right-click the header.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 1 In the Project Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. As you assign sprinklers to systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt. Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select Piping. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. click View ➤ Systems. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. However.Fire Protection Plan . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. indicating that it’s the active view.

within the Piping Systems folder. 11 With the system still selected. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . Creating a Piping System | 285 . named Fire Protection Wet. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and click Select. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Next. and select the system. select an initial piping layout. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. indicating the logical connection. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. press Tab. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected.

these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). click Settings. verify that 2800. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.0 is specified.Wet is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select 150 mm. providing system editing tools. enter FP Wet_Zone2. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. click Solutions. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. as shown. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 12 On the Options Bar. When the layout is finished. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. enter -3650. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for System Name. 19 Click OK. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and a piping layout preview displays. and on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the system. 13 In the System Browser. For Pipe Type. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 23 For Offset. click Place Base. 22 On the Options Bar. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select Branch. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . system equipment. verify that Main is selected. 15 In the drawing area.The Edit Piping System panel displays. In the left pane. For Offset.

and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Creating a Piping System | 287 . A (parallel movement control) displays. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. In general. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and select solution 4. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. verify that Network is selected. and green represents branch lines).

View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 29 Click Finish Layout. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 32 If necessary. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. as shown. or manually modify the pipe. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 2 Zoom in. and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.33 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and select the elbow fitting as shown. the Connect Into tool.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and various manual pipe creation tools. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .rvt. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. 3 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). or a system component to display system tools. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 5 In the drawing area. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. mechanical equipment. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 8 In the corridor. click Finish Editing System. and pipe or duct is created. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. click Add To System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 9 On the Edit System panel. you can select the pipe or duct. air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . radiators. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

14 Close the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.11 On the Generate Layout panel. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 13 Click Finish Layout. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. for Solution Type. 21 In the Piping Plan. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . and select solution 5. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 23 View the result in the 3D view. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that Network is selected. and then tile the views. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Open Design ➤ FP .

26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.24 In the Piping Plan. 25 Select the sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. right-click. 28 In the drawing area. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. select 2800. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. for Offset. and then press Esc.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Fire Protection Piping Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar. 31 In the plan view. select 1 : 50. Because the whole system highlights.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .6 Press Esc. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

and then right-click the top connector.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. and press Enter. 19 Make Level 2 .9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for View Name. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 If necessary. select FP . enter FP Section_Stair.Design. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. For View Classification. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. drag the top section boundary line up. enter 2135. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. For Default View Template. 22 In the drawing area.Design the active view. and click Apply Default View Template. Under Identity Data. and click Draw Pipe. Click OK. right-click Design ➤ FP . select MEP Section. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee.Fire Protection Plan .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Select the tee fitting. and then click Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . select Design. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 17 Move the cursor up. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 15 Press Spacebar. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Sub-Discipline. 10 In the Project Browser.

23 In the section view. verify that Automatically Connect is active.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. select . for Diameter. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 25 Verify that Fire Protection . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and then click Modify. 24 Select the cabinet.

34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. click Yes to load a family. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector.rfa. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . verify that M_Gate Valve . and click Open.29 Close the section view. 32 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. and then click Modify.

and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .35 Open 3D Fire Protection.Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. click Training Files. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications.

and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. select 25mm. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. width. 8 Click Modify. and click OK. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. or width. height. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. click Check None. 4 In the floor plan view. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . or height. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 6 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. width. for Diameter. 7 On the Options Bar.

click to place the tag. Press Esc. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. By hiding the linked file. and click Open. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 17 On the View Control Bar. select the linked architectural file. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. They display only in the view in which they were placed.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. and after each segment highlights. 18 In the 3D view. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Clear Leader. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . NOTE Tags are view specific. 12 If necessary. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. .rfa.

The main piping is selected and displays in red. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. and when the section highlights. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. press Tab. for Diameter. 21 On the Options Bar. select 100mm. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .

and maximize the floor plan. 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 40mm.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this exercise. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You added tags to pipes. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you created a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial.

304 .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

and click Rename. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and view references. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. right-click Copy of Level 1.rvt. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. and click OK. If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 307 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and apply a view template. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. under Floor Plans. dependent views. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. matchlines. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. views and put them on the sheet. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click Rename. 4 Using the same method. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 7 Close the file without saving. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. create dependent views for areas B and C. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. more focused. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files.rvt. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 In the drawing area. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and then press Esc. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. and click OK. and click OK.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.

Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. For Line Weight. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. In the Color dialog. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select Double Dash . select 11. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Click OK. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . For Line Pattern. click the current value. 13 Press Esc twice. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 19 In the drawing area. select black. and then press Esc. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. for Target view. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. on the Options Bar. as shown.20 Select the upper view reference and. 21 Using the same method.

29 Close the file with or without saving it. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 27 Using the same method.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. click Training Files.Domestic Water. enter Plumbing Isometric . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and click Properties. and zoom to each of the view references. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and select the section box. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Zoom in. right-click 3D Plumbing. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Plumbing Isometric. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. for View Name. For Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

select Dash. Click OK. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. 10 Right-click. and click to select it. select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. for View Classification. For Pattern. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Documentation. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and then click OK. The section crop lines no longer display. right-click Plumbing Isometric . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. Click Apply.

12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and click to select it. 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. and click to select it. as shown). 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 15 Right-click.

rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . verify that Common is selected. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and in the view properties. specify Plumbing . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. For Slope. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. and in the Type Selector.5mm Arial. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 19 Using methods learned previously.Isometric. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click on the Format value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.16 Press Esc. select 1.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. and for Default View Template.

22 Click OK twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. for Rounding. select To the nearest 10. 26 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet.■ In the Format dialog. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. click Training Files. When the view is associated with a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation.rvt. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. you use a plan view to create a callout view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 . for Scale.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select 1 : 50. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.

and select the viewport. drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Click OK. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. double-click M601 .

For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for View Name.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. Creating Callout Views | 321 .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click the detail view. 25 In the Project Browser.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. and click Rename. and click OK. under Names. enter Typical WSHP Detail.

322 .

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Creating Annotations In this exercise.rvt. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. click Training Files. symbols. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. work with model-based components. duct tags. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and annotation to create a legend. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linetypes. 323 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 With the text still selected. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. and select 1. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 9 Press Esc twice.

Creating Annotations | 325 . and then click Right Straight. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. a segment of round duct. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. as shown.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area.

and click OK. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. for Ducts. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 22 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.rfa.17 Click Modify. 21 In the Load Family dialog. clear Leader. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. click Load. and click Open. 25 In the drawing area. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. If necessary. 24 On the Options Bar. as shown. under Category. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.

29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. and Attached End. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 327 . select Horizontal. 31 On the Options Bar.26 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. Leader.

then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 36 Press Esc twice.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 34 In the drawing area. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader.

click Training Files. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and all elements of that type are affected. not simply an instance property. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. for Leader Arrowhead. lay out. and lock lighting fixtures. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions | 329 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the last tag placed. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. That’s because you changed a type property. and click OK.

select the dimension line. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 14 Using the same method. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and then select the interior face of the wall. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 12 Click EQ. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 13 Press Esc.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. On the Options Bar. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.

click the 3 interior locks on the line. and press Enter.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Creating a Legend | 331 . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 20 Using the same methods. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.9). 17 Press Esc. click Training Files. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. linework. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. annotation symbols. Because the dimensions are locked. and offset them from the wall. enter 2430.rvt. and notes.

6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select 1. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . For Scale. select Floor Plan.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For View. enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. ■ 9 In the drawing area.200 Neck. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 10 Using the same method. Click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. select 1 : 50.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .

and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1.11 Press Esc. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 333 .

DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. and then press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. 21 Press Esc.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 34 Using the method learned previously. enter E. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Creating a Legend | 335 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Title w Line .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. click Training Files. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and text. A drafting view using detail components. 337 . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.113 East elevation view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .Detailing 15 In this lesson. A detail callout that references another view. detail groups.

Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. and click to place it. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then modify and align the views. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 8 Using the same method. 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . place Power Riser . clear Leader.113 East on the sheet. Next. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. for Title on Sheet. and click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. select the 113 North view. under Identity Data. giving the appearance of a single view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. right-click. 13 Right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line.9 Press Esc. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Deactivate View.

19 Select the Level 1 line. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. select the 113 East elevation view. 22 Press Esc. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. and click Activate View.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select Title w Line . You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise. right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.

you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. As you draw. expand Lines.113 North view. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . click Training Files. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m.rvt. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. and then click OK. verify that Chain is selected. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. notice that there are no snaps active. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the New Subcategory dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . In the Line Styles dialog. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. click New. select 6. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. for Name. Under Modify Subcategories. for Line Weight.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3mm.10 Press Esc. 11 Using the same method. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.

Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 28 Click above the cap. 29 Click Modify. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and select 1. 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. select Multiple.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.0. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter. you can ensure that they stay together. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. click on the length dimension value. Using the same method. and then press Esc. enter 3. Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 7. enter 12. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You enter exact values for each line length. for Offset. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 40 Press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and press Enter.

55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. select all 3 lines. 50 With the group selected. 52 Select the detail group. 46 In the Project Browser. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 54 Select the group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. while pressing Ctrl. for Name. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. enter Ground. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 47 In the drawing area. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and then press Esc.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B. and click OK. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and will place it on sheet E01. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

rvt. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. 8 On the ViewCube. select 3D Views. and then press Esc. Back.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and Left sides converge. and click Apply View Template. 3 Select the section box. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and then click the corner where the Top. 5 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. click Home. for Name. click Training Files. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and double click Typical Make Up Air. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and click OK. Walkthroughs.

Click OK. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.■ ■ Under Names. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Move the cursor down and to the left. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 15 Using the same method. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. select 3D HVAC Iso.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog.18 Press Esc. under Extents. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. To rotate and reposition a text label. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. as shown. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 19 Complete the text labels. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop Region Visible. as shown.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.rvt. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Place a detail component. and click View Properties. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. and click Activate View. select Crop View and Section Box. and under Extents. scroll down.25 Click OK. 32 In the Instance Properties. 33 Right-click the view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 29 Right click the view. 30 On the View Control Bar. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. clear Crop Region Visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. and click Deactivate View. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. right-click the view name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 1 : 5. select Plumbing. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 In the drawing area. 12 On the Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. as shown. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For Scale. and click Properties. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). click the point at the top of the drain. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Click OK. For View Classification. 3 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom in to the component.

and then press Esc. 21 In the drawing area. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and click OK. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .I. 18 With the filled region still selected. Concrete. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. select C. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify. for Type.P. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 20 Select 1.

30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. select Multiple. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. select the filled region. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 28 Click Modify.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 34 Press Esc. and then click to select them. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 23 In the drawing area. (Line). 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .

49 Click Modify.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. press Tab to highlight the chain. 52 In the Create Group dialog. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and then click to select them.. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and click OK. enter Flashing Membrane_F. for Name.D. draw wide detail lines as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 45 Using the method learned previously. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. (Rectangle).

Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. press Spacebar twice. 55 Press Esc. as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. 64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. as shown. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.

A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select 15000 (Division 15 . Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 76 To select the leader start point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 72 If necessary. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the text insertion point.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 71 Click Modify.70 In the Keynotes dialog.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.

open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful